Home

2012 Dodge Challenger Owner`s Manual

1. Flash To Pass 3 uci rte e rex 147 To Deactivate vocac yes S ede ee 153 Map Reading Lights 147 To Resume Speed 00000 154 Interior Lights verre RR E 147 To Vary The Speed Setting 154 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 148 To Accelerate For Passing 154 Intermittent Wiper System 149 W Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 155 Mist Feature xis ve ea eae dedu 150 Parksense Sensors 000 0000 155 Windshield Washers 04 150 Parksense Warning Display 156 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Parksense Display 05 156 Automatic Headlights Only 151 Enabling Disabling Parksense 159 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 151 Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 152 ol eri iahi pu 160 lo Actiyate ia ees Rc RR TR ee 153 Cleaning The Parksense System 160 To Set A Desired Speed 153 Parksense System Usage Precautions 160 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es E Overhead Console sess Courtesy Reading Lights Sunglasses Storage lesen ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
2. Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 29 5 Amp Cluster Electronic 36 25 Amp Hands Free Phone Orange Stability Program Natural If Equipped Radio ESP Powertrain Amplifier Feed Control Module 37 15 Amp Transmission PCM STOP LIGHT Blue SNNT 38 10 Amp Cargo Light Vehicle 30 10 Amp Door Modules Red Information Module Red is e 2 If Equipped teering Contro 39 10 Amp H p Heated Mirrors If Module SCM Red Equipped a ES Ex 40 5 Amp Auto Inside Rear 32 m Orange view Mirror Heated 33 Seats If Equipped 34 Switch Bank 35 5 Amp Antenna Module If 41 Exe Orange Equipped Power 42 30 Amp Front Blower Motor Mirrors Pink EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse 43 30 Amp Rear Window Pink Defroster 44 20 Amp Amplifier Sunroof Blue If Equipped Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho rized dealer The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11 The passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 12 The door modules the driver power window switch and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13 If
3. TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 4 55 3x rnm Rr ttir IRR RR EUR ah shies E NEREAREN caer LR Roe e nin 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cee ccc hn nn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee hn n la UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece cece eee hh nnn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 ccc cece cece cece eee hh e hh hn 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES cece ccc c cece rece c m hh hs 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cc ccc cece ccc c cece c cere eee cence eee hh 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 cc ccc cece creer eee c cece eee eee eee hh nn IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cece cece reer reer hh mnn 10 MIND EEX du ULNIS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction s sese 4 Wi Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 6 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warran
4. Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or None undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Information Inform Top 40 Top 40 Jazz Jazz Weather Weather News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Nostalgia Nostalga is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected Music Type name The Personality Persnlty Music Type function only operates when in the FM Public Public mode Rhythm and Blues R amp B If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Music Rel Musc Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Religious Talk Rel Talk exited and the radio will tune to the preset station noe Bac SETUP Button Soft Soft Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Soft Rock Soft Rck the following items SOH EByttuancPIHes Son REE Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow Sports Sports you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the Talk Talk TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will
5. Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 9 15 50 Amp Radiator Fan 10 30 Amp Windshield Wiper Red Pink 16 11 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake 17 Pink System ABS Valves 18 zm a 12 40 Amp Radiator Fan Lo 19 Em a Green High 20 ze 13 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake 21 E ES EE Red System ABS Pump Motor 22 14 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 ivl a ete There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center e When installing the power distribution center contains fuses and relays cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Rear Power Distribution Center 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 60 Amp 3 Ignition Off Draw 5 30 Amp Heated Seats If Yellow
6. 411 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Maintenance Free Battery PrOSTaM Sts cessus UR IER Fut sce 405 Ait Conditioner Maintenanes E Replacement Parts cere eem rn 406 E E 415 H Dealer Service llle 406 Windshield Wiper Blades o rerien iae 416 Adding Washer Fluid 416 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Exhaust System cere ew aon s 417 W Vehicle Storage uses Ie ex Pe 443 Cooling System 0 eee eee 420 W Replacement Bulbs esses 444 Diaks SGN s coissa rae Cede eas Aas es 425 W Bulb Replacement c 4vkea err RR 445 Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Transmission If Equipped 427 Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Models With Manual Transmission If Equipped 427 Halogen Headline M PUPPER stesso TS Automatic Transmission If Equipped 428 d s panes s PR Models Rear Axle cu sse eee es 430 With High Intensity Discharge HID Appearance Care And Protection From Headlamps If Equipped 445 COMOSION 4 48 thane ee e yc doe dae nes 430 Front Rear Side Marker Lamp 446 MUSS cago ne eds Sees HRS Fees AER 436 Tail Turn And Stop Lamp 446 Integrated Power Module 436 Center Tail Backup Lamp 449 Rear Power Distribution Center 43
7. 000000000008 298 425 Anti Lock ABS secretis raseret iss 298 301 FElud Check iress9km re ainsa 425 452 Master Cylinder sasis antagna 0005 425 Parking i kde Soa nt Rr e Warning Light 205 Brake Parking oes oot Sa Rr Brake Transmission Interlock Brakes eus e e oS E EX reis Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 482 INDEX EE Brightness Interior Lights 148 Bulb Replacement llle sse 444 445 Bulbs Light 2229 4 bm Rei 84 444 Calibration Compass ees 210 Capacities Fluid iu sees dea s araa es 450 Caps Filler Fuel 22d ke Rr PER CORREA 346 Qil ENING as asean ms eek RE REUS 410 Radiator Coolant Pressure 423 Car Washes sse ek ua eR E art 431 Carbon Monoxide Warning 80 345 Cargo Vehicle Loading 05 349 Cellular Phone 0 0 00 cee eae 95 252 Center High Mounted Stop Light 449 Certification Label llle 349 Chains Dre ace e ag Sie ace dO ERU ns 328 Changing A Flat lue i2 99 6x3 6x ehe 379 Chart Tite Sizing eek sealed Rer 311 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 405 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 80 Checks Safety ise mE ss cena edo bee oe 80 Child Restraint 0 0 0 70 71 72 75 77 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 75 Clean Air Gasoline 2 0 0 0 0 eee pires 342 Cleaning Wh
8. 18 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 421 450 Disposal gespa doe RED e ea ates 423 Appearance Care icsrcseriessesessicmes s 430 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assistance Towing 6 anaiai 109 Auto Down Power Windows 39 Auto Unlock Doors seen 33 Automatic Dimming Mirror 91 ee INDEX 481 Automatic Door Locks 0 00000 eens 33 Automatic Headlights 143 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 252 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives 54 9 ese x hee RO yes 428 Automatic Transmission 280 428 430 Adding Fluid 0004 430 452 Autostitk ses 6h gee ir t ex er pd ex 287 Fluid and Filter Changes 430 Fluid Change ue coercere e pF Oder 430 Fluid Level Check 00 0005 429 Fluid Typ x4 e mn a eee nen 452 Special Additives vs eser px 428 Autostick sees 287 Axle Fluid 22s RR REG EI 452 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 452 B Pillar Location 93e em ees 315 Battery ai aoea t E pape KP ee a deg 412 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 LOCATON erransa hm ce RO dada ERROR 412 Belts Seat zw ieramen EE ands ay Bede dt 46 81 Body Mechanism Lubrication 415 Brake Assist System secese diede togte satas 302 Brake Control System Electronic 301 Brake Eluid oe vad base ee RR IS A 452 Brake System
9. 345 a Trailer Towing 02404 n RR 351 Common Towing Definitions 351 Trailer Hitch Classification 354 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 355 Trailer And Tongue Weight 355 Towing Requirements Towing Tips li Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Automatic Transmission If Equipped Manual Transmission If Equipped ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 356 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission
10. Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid L 0 O O O O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 2
11. 472 E In Mexico Contactes e menoa tiaa esea aa 472 TUCO pegian aipa R 470 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Traction Grades sess sassa aitan eee eee 477 Quality Grades 3 adhe b e bea nl 477 Treadwe ar zu uidgiwa ewheiy i3 YS 477 Temperature Grades 00 478 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 471 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manu
12. s ag Programming A Rolling Code Programming A Non Rolling Code Canadian Gate Operator Programming Using HomeLink SeCurily i349 4 9 PR d doe Eiaeaen es Troubleshooting Tips General Information 0 163 163 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 173 Opening Sunroof Express Mode 174 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 174 Closing Sunroof Express Mode 174 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 174 Pinch Protect Feature 0 174 Pinch Protect Override 175 Venting Sunroof Express 175 Sunshade Operation 000 175 Wind Bufteting vex te alee eae ee 175 Sunroof Maintenance 0 175 Ignition Off Operation 0 0 176 Bi Electrical Power Outlets 04 176 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 a Cupholdots 22s cereo e ERR Re 180 Console Storage 1 scien ce Ex AR xd 181 Front Cupholders 0000 180 W Rear Window Features 00 183 Rear Cupholders 00 0 180 Rear Window Defroster 183 E Console Features serene 181 E Sliding Center Console Armrest 181 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
13. 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission clutch and rear axle in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 miles 800 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide ope
14. Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains so phisticated electronic equipm
15. If Equipped Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission The fluid level should be at the 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or damage to the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Transmission Fluid If contaminated with water change the fluid immedi ately See your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Trans
16. If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni tion system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Normal Starting With Integrated Key Manual Transmission Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor and turn the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 ignition switch to the START position and release when Automatic Transmission If Equipped the engine starts If the engine fails to start within The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting before shifting into any driving gear procedure CAUTION WARNING NING Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it ing precautions are not observed started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to verter and once the engine has started ignite and a complete stop damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from anoth
17. The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than mm appropriate for the steering wheel position 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capa bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in th
18. When the 1 4 Skip Shift Indicator Message is dis played the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to fourth gear After you shift the transmission to fourth gear you can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear e If you skip more than one gear while downshift ing or downshift at too high an engine speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch e Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph 24 km h as you Downshifting could damage the engine and or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life down shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNING CAUTION e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running
19. 0 04 452 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 55 Preparation for Jacking 4 381 Pretensioners Seat BMS sa atipa agua ERU a Ht ale Ro a ALS 54 Programmable Electronic Features 212 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry lille 21 Radial Ply Tir s i402 44 914 83 204 ems 322 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 423 Radio Operation 0 0 cee E eee 252 Radio Remote Controls 0040 250 Rear Cupholder 000 0000 eee 180 Rear Park Sense System 00005 155 Rear Seat Folding 0 000000 c eee 139 Rear Window Defroster 0040 183 Rear Window Features 0005 183 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0 0 00 0c ee 69 Recreational Towing 00000000 ee 363 Reformulated Gasoline 04 342 Refrigerdnt 22 versen instiga e d ER dE e s 415 494 INDEX ae Release Hood 1 cee eee 141 Reminder Lights On 0 0 050 145 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 0 0 002 eee 54 Remote Control Starting System css aset eri e 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 250 Remote Starting System less 27 Remote Trunk Release llle 40 Replacement Bulbs c oa Seni roana turpiin kis 444 Replacement Keys 0 0 000 cece eens 17 Replacement Parts 0 000 000 eee 406 Replacement Tires 1
20. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC displa
21. UP Button Press and release the UP button to scroll up ward through the main menus and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll V downward through the main menus and sub menus 040935150 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access D to main menus sub menus or to select a per sonal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK Door Ajar Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Oil Change Required Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Did Not Train Low Tire Pressure with a single chime Service TPM System wit
22. ai T C uc 701727 f HALLENCGEHFR OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
23. e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the vn button while the system is listing the message and say Send 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or 10 Thanks number of the person you wish to send the message to 11 See You in 15 minutes List of Preset Messages Yes No 12 I am on my way 13 TII be late 14 Are you there yet neS are yOu 15 Where are we meeting I need more direction LOL Why 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet I love you 19 Send number to call Call me 20 Start without me v OND gi P WN o Call me later ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Press the Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement
24. Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours the Passive Entry feature for the handle may time out Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle s Passive Entry feature ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door handles but do NOT pull the handle the doors will automatically lock after 60 seconds To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021837301 Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further
25. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust s
26. To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con t
27. for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages
28. 409 450 Synthetic iw ai RUPES PU aee RR 411 MISCOSIU esr er E ERAS 410 450 Onboard Diagnostic System 404 405 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 164 Operating Precautions 0 0005 404 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors lesse 91 Overdrive ees son a Ras esta bs 287 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 000 287 Overhead Console s is 0 0 cece 163 Overheating Engine 205 192 367 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 475 PamtCare o npa oa oan ae ke Rr RO ER E aang 430 Panic Alarm sacre pedes kong d owe PER RS 25 Park Sense System Rear 0 0000 155 Parking Brake uu c ee E eoe e eres 295 Passing Lights serra sae ue ER RE S ea 147 en INDEX 493 Personal Settings scsi ane ae hae hanes ge eene 212 Pete neces RUM UPS E EE NEN eas E e PES 79 Phone Cellula 4 92 44385 2h ale band dae s 95 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 95 Placard Tire and Loading Information 315 Power Brakes 22e due RETENER 298 Deck Lid Release lees 40 Distribution Center Fuses 439 Door Locks eee 32 MIEEOIS ad eaaa eE oe ek an eh aur a P 92 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 176 SOAS us ace aes qu Cer RU RR 130 STEETINE assises acies Fed Gacy dose ts 294 SunrOOE 244 44 dew va enbxNES EE E 173 Windows creme d ot e ERRRETEY ERES 38 Power Steering Fluid
29. 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 14 7 Quarts 13 9 Liters Formula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L and 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended Automatic Transmission Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 91 Octane Manual Transmission 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Automatic Transmission
30. 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire TIRE
31. ABS If Equipped This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Traction Control System TCS If Equipped This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential LSD and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This
32. DOOR LOCKS If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door Manual Door Locks the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door WARNING Il lock knob on each door trim panel upward e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Un supervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued Door Lock Knob 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch Power Door Locks M The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the The power door lock switch
33. If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Trip Odometer button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass
34. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tion Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers 022635364 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Fr
35. Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows o
36. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions The power seat switches are used to control the position of the seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down mE The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Power Seat Switch Power Lumbar If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rear
37. To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 034607292 Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the WARNING battery and or prevent the engine from starting To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 034636790 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 18 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 2 9 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e After the use of high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly
38. WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having CAUTION adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings
39. an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MI
40. desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positionin
41. e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021307469 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock both doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Dri
42. for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the 5 button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between 34 and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the gt button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the pilis ic amp x3 button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort WARM WEATHER Press the 2 button to turn recirculate off be If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near and turn the air conditioning on If O Be z aga it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near COOL OR COLD Press the 5 button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between 5 and then turn the air 6466 6 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near J and turn 6 46 ae the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between i an
43. tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a th
44. vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and trun
45. vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged TIRE CHAINS parts of the chain before further use Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain mile 0 8 km manufacturer Install tire chains only on P215 65R17 e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h using standard chains on P225 60R18 and P235 55R18 using model 0143 tirechaindealer com and on P235 55R19 using model Z 575 scc chain com Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 CAUTION Continued e Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating
46. 0 2 0 000000 cca aee 327 Reporting Safety Defects 040 474 Restraint Head ille 137 Restraints Child suu Ross a Gres 70 Restraints Occupant 6 0 eee eee eee 42 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 392 Rotation Tires aduer ni ERES 330 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 81 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 84 Safety Defects Reporting 474 Safety Information Tire 309 Safety Tips 02 i ed4 twd gta betwee Bab od ws 80 Safety Exhaust GaS ss sra ke e e ag 80 Satellite Radio Antenna 05 238 Schedule Maintenance lees 454 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 05 435 Seat Belt Reminder llle 54 Seat Belts issus rcu be bees aac de 42 46 81 And Pregnant Women isses 55 Child Restraint 70 71 72 77 Extender 4 22 et So Ro Re 56 Front Seat s d ea or ee eae es 46 47 INSPECHOM esranesp cte susp Leet YS 81 Operating Instructions nanana aaa aaae 47 Pretensioners i e erete ies 54 Rear Seat ny ok aang kh eR EE Eug 46 ne INDEX 495 Reminder 6 ia0sa0eshaecawedaaes 194 Untwisting Procedure 0 51 SeatS i d e ea ade PROSE OER Pe e 130 Adjustment ges aia RU Racer eae 130 Head Restraints llle 137 Heated gr a seca evap Rack REOR S ata ah e ero 133 Height Adjustment 05 130 POWet cose e Reb debe Ree eRe 130 Rea
47. 17 39 022662642 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that WEENINGE Contmed require air bag occupant protection e If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which WARNING will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC of the vehicle for any reason The area where the SABIC is located should re Knee Impact Bolsters main free from any obstructions The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects driver and the front passenger and position front occu between you and the side air bags the perfor pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front mance could be advers
48. 319 ME Tire Chains ios gy outs bases cas 328 Tire Pressure f eR 319 W Snow Tires Tire Inflation Pressures 320 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 330 Radial Ply Tires osere asa ossee asradi 322 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 331 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Base Systemi case Ea due EEEE 334 And Wheel If Equipped 322 Premium System If Equipped 336 Compact opare Tic CE IH ped ceive uae General Information 340 Full Size Spare If Equipped 324 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME B Fuel Requirements x coewsccen EX S rre 341 W Adding Fuel ee o Rm 346 3 6L And 5 7L Engine With Automatic Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 346 Transmission llle 341 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 348 SAEC EREIHE ate MRNA TSS 4885 8 E S S 349 SCIES MIN quet rapta xin Vehicle Certification Label 349 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 342 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 349 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 343 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 349 EE eS a toga Overloading 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee 350 Materials Added To Fuel 344 A cocos tb Erat r ne EPOR aie 350 Fuel System Cautions 0 0 344 Carbon Monoxide Warnings
49. 6 you can press the amp vR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EvR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the amp vR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts of
50. AND OPERATING 273 Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the clutch pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and hold the ENGINE START STOP button for no more than 15 sec onds Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the flo
51. Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Continued 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e tis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the shift lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must
52. Calling To initiate three way calling press the Ave button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp e button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Ph
53. Data Recorder Event 0 000000 c eee 69 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 148 Daytime Running Lights 144 Dealer Service 1 0 eee 406 Deck Lid Emergency Release 42 Deck Lid Power Release 0000 40 Defroster Rear Window 183 Defroster Windshield 00 82 256 Delay Intermittent Wipers 149 Diagnostic System Onboard 404 Dimmer Switch Headlight 147 404 INDEX EE Dipsticks Oil Engine Disabled Vehicle Towing Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 152 Electronic Stability Control ESC 305 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 191 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 200 Emergency Deck Lid Release 42 Emergency Trunk Release 200 42 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 392 Hazard Warning Flasher 367 Jacking sepa t Nolet nS 379 Jump Starting 0 2 00 388 Overheating ss cox e ekbg
54. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge The mirrors have one detent clockwise towards the rear of Folding Mirrors the vehicle and three detent s counterclockwise towards Power Mirrors the front of the vehicle The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 move When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn Heated Mirrors If Equipped the control to the center position to prevent accidentally These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This moving a mirror feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information GNE Vanity Mirrors A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and sw
55. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels
56. Failure to follow this warning may 060633619 result in personal injury es Mounting Spare Tire ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft Ib 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts 388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower t
57. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 314 STARTING AND OPERAT NG SS Tire Terminology and Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa Kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tir
58. If MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Equipped ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Rear Axle 3 6L Engine MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 API GL 5 or equiva lent Rear Axle 5 7L Engine MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 API GL 5 or equivalent with MOPAR Friction Modifier Hypoid Gear Additive MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 454 Required Maintenance Intervals 455 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E S 8 454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you
59. Interior Lights oue ses ae RR ERI RA 147 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 149 Introductio icis rire REIHE RR 4 Jack Location ess amaire 9 RARE REN 379 Jack Operation 0 0 cece eee eee 382 Jacking Instructions 0000 382 Jump Starting 2 ee ee eee eee 388 Key In Reminder aas ciem de thine teg 16 Key Programming 5 224 e a mr RR 18 en INDEX 489 Key Replacement 42 2 den em Paes 17 LASTS scaena Re e e thc dos 84 142 Key Sentry Immobilizer sac ereraa daana 16 PUD AS unseres dere seers 63 64 68 82 192 Keyless Enter N Go 0004 34 208 268 Alani son dtd Edita SE PERRO E dr 197 Keyless Entry System llle ss 21 Anti LocK iu os sec 199 300 Keyless GO ca oer E Y Ede do UE Y HORA 12 208 Automatic Headlights 143 KEYS ETT 12 Brake Assist Warning 307 Kicker Sound System 000005 248 Brake Warning 0000505 196 298 Knee Bolster 3 ic su go84 i2e teed oP ERES 56 Bulb Replacement 444 445 Center Mounted Stop lille 449 Lane Change and Turn Signals 146 Courtesy Reading 147 163 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0000 46 Cruise nasa ni emaite 64 40nd oo 4d ele e 190 LATCH Daytime Running 005 144 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 74 75 Dimmer Switch Headlight 146 147 Latches 5 2 bap awe e Re RE wea hes 84 Electronic Stability P
60. OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recircu lation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button How
61. ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the i
62. Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Continued 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console Front Cupholders Illuminated Front Cupholders If Equipped The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs They are turned on with the headlights or parking lights Refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Rear Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant s el bows UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Rear Cupholders CONSOLE FEATURES Sliding Center Console Armrest The center console armrest slides forward with three detents to provide flexibility for comfort cupholder use and shifting e
63. PARK ASSIST 032740690 Park Assist Ready ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing Fa B k Ass st three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone Cus t er As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC Uff display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous PARK ASSIST 032740691 Park Assist System Off 032740694 Slow Tone 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se PARK ASSIST Fast Tone 032740693 PARK ASSIST LL gl 032740692 Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 NOTE ParkSense will reduce the radio volume if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enabling Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 24 in 24 14 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 60 cm 60 35 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Contin
64. RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended 422 MAINTAIN
65. REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses This feature allows an iPod or external USB device tobe Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device plugged into the USB port located in the center console Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external or glove compartment USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod e a a and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate R Y plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control Su yA feature to control the connected device c a 044036451 Center Console USB AUX Connector Port ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a
66. STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty e Trip A 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the UP or DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading befo
67. Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 e If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE
68. Service Manuals before MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES attempting any procedure yourself The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per you have any doubt about your ability to perform a form repairs and service when necessary could service job take your vehicle to a competent me result in more costly repairs damage to other chanic components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or
69. The air bag may inflate accidentally or Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components While the air for any air bag system service If your seat includ bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs have an authorized dealer service serviced in any way including removal or theair bag system immediately loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first turned to the ON RUN position for persons with disabilities contact your autho The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to rized dealer eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the
70. Weight 355 TOWING sa dead aee erri aires wo vl acd 351 24 Hour Towing Assistance 109 Disabled Vehicle lille 395 EIU NECEM T 355 Recreational leen 363 Weight 2e se pe RE E Re 355 Towing Assistance llle 109 Traction Control 3 232v Ve EGER 302 Trailer Towing nee giog eera e 351 Cooling System Tips 0004 362 Hitches iu ses Gov hea eA eae E Sx 354 Minimum Requirements 356 TipS ed e Ier e gh ERE eaid 361 Trailer and Tongue Weight 355 Wiring rk xa ss Re RA D E RS 360 Trailer Towing Guide 005 355 Trailer Weight cesat cae ee Reb eS eee 355 Transfer Case Fluid ceat re irn ra dne e 452 Transmission 605 4402 bs b RT Y e ob ed 428 AXutORialie 3 deese EE RE Se 280 428 Fluid ek 4 oh cbr er aG ii eased ted 452 Manual peg gen ais bre arte e ERRORES 274 SHINE iei dees heer Petia ERE RE as 279 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00 26 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 00 21 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 164 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Transporting Pets 79 Tread Wear Indicators 000006 326 Trip Odometer 0 0000008 190 195 Trunk Lid Deck Lid RR Ra 40 42 Trunk Release Remote Control 40 Trunk Release Emergency llle 42 e
71. Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the
72. YOUR VEHICLE es To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the res
73. accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch belt is routed through the seat web guide When the belt plate into the buckle until you hear a click is routed outside of the seat web guide the latch plate will contact the quarter trim panel Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate To Buckle 022662639 Latch Plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snug Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones Wear the
74. air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when t
75. also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials
76. and has limited coverage in Alaska 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna
77. appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If PARK ASSIST SERVICE or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately five seconds ParkSense when on will reduce the radio volume when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not
78. as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 5 7L Engine With Manual Transmission The 5 7L engine with manual transmis sion is designed to meet all emissions O1 regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using 800dfab amp high quality premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ET
79. authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Suppl tal Seat Mounted Side Air B SAB e No objects should be placed over or near the air ee Ui de deut b he i Lb h provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant ag on the instrument pane ecause any su
80. be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 031340035 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION ES Headlights And Parking Lights To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to The headlight switch is located on the left side of the close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi instrument panel This switch controls the operation of mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged lights WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Headlight Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn it to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically
81. begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operation Instru
82. belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically r
83. buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device m
84. cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 045840031 Automatic Temperature Control es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Automatic Operation Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dialin the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72 F 22 C however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary 25
85. cause that destroys the paint and protective coating Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If youcarry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider u i mud or stone shields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on and open scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly nor with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion e Remove as much of the stai
86. dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles With Compa
87. feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESC Electronic Stability Control in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transmission Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a v
88. fluid and filter s J Replace the accessory drive belt s M Inspect the rear axle fluid M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary a a O O O C Lc Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
89. for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry e Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal trans two conditions ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2 This device must accept any interference that may be opener that has a stop and reverse feature as received including interference that may cause undesired required by Federal safety standards This includes operatio
90. held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAR ING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program ee UNDERSTANDING
91. ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Enter N Go The fan is temperature con trolled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position RUN position for Keyless Enter N Go You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT
92. information 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock both doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE Both doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob present in the ignition If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be
93. is located on each door trim Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and either door is open the power en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Au
94. label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
95. left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate If equipped with a manual transmis sion the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph 8 km h before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button on the Re mote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of 8142177 the decklid overhang The release Trunk Release Button E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition With the ignition switch in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym bol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape
96. light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible EN STARTING AND OPERATING 301 If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESC This system includes the ABS Anti Lock Brake System the TCS Traction Control System the BAS Brake Assist System and the ESC Electronic Stability Control These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill Start Assist HSA is standard on manual transmission models Anti Lock Brake System
97. n 40 Programming Additional Transmitters 26 WiTrunk Safety Warning i seo ese edn es 41 Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 Trunk Emergency Release 42 General Information 4 27 W Occupant Restraints 6 0244 issues Ri 42 lll Remote Starting System 00 27 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 46 How To Use Remote Start Ls 28 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 51 Mi Door Locks 1 ee 31 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 51 Manual Door Locks 0 05 31 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR Power Door Locks 000 32 a 9 B Keyless Enter N GO esse bea ie ens 34 PUSH Mageeriiets Heater nie nan ey ats Pe E Windows cece ccc cece cece 38 Seat Belt Pretensioners 54 Power Windows 00000000 38 um ibd n mE 54 A C EE Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 55 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belt Extender osso lt 6 ese cx c 56 Mibalcty Tips 2140 18 Sasa Y EC iieis etts 80 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Transporting Passengers 80 RN MM eee ae E Pee as ceases eee 80 2m Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Event Data Recorder EDR 69 NVelucle seco aoe events dys ia E a ees 81 Child Restrai
98. name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the amp vR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if availabl
99. next phone connection Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the
100. of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace a
101. other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting th
102. rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an button located at the base of the head restraint and push additional storage area Pull on the loops located on the downward on the head restraint upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use Push Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for tether routing Folding Rear Seat 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children Folded Rear Seat should be seated and using the proper restraint When the seatback is folded to the upright position make system sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must
103. release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone if equipped power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power out lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Display ECO Mode If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Keyless Enter N Go Passi
104. the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex desired Using body pressure move forward and rear haustion or other physical condition must exercise ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have care when using the seat heater It may cause burns latched even at low temperatures especially if used for WARNING long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the position and release the lever To return the seatback lift shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest the lever lean forward and release the lever In a collision you could slide under the seat b
105. the center con sole 061536522 Shift Lever Override Access Cover 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Condition Wheels OFF The TRA MIS ION MANUAL TRANSMISSION If transmission is operable If transmission is operable Flat Tow NONE e Transmission in NEUTRAL e Transmission in NEUTRAL e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e 65 mph 104 km h max speed 15 miles 24 km max distance Wheel Lift or Dolly Front NOT ALLOWED NOT RECOMMENDED Tow Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position 3906 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE If the vehicle s ba
106. the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press the UP or DOWN button until CALIBRATE COMPASS displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 5 Slowly complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the i
107. the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING pm Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death NOTE Itis illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 0 0 12 W Vehicle Security Alarm 0 0 18 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Rearming Of The System 19 Key BOD seecae eaa eie nem rat ee 13 To Arm The System sss ed Rm 19 Removing Key Fob From Ignition 14 To Disarm The System ssssn 20 Key In Ignition Reminder 16 illuminated Entry 12 2 n 21 Mi Sentty Key acese ccs vee 69 ex RR er REA 16 W Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Replacement Keys 000000 17 To Unlock The Doors 56 22 Customer Key Programming 18 To Lock The DOoOts x22 Seem 24 General Information 4 18 To Open The Trunk 00 25 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Using The Panic Alarm 25 W Trunk Lock And Release 2
108. the hood cautions do not open the hood until the radiator has had time CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle TIREFIT KIT IF EQUIPPED the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until Small punctures up to 4 in 6 mm in the tire tread can be the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the De used 5 outside temperatures down to approximately engine off immediately and call for service AF 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km h WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk Nee Lo o 060410595 1 Sealant Bottle THSEELE IEGCaRE 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Mode Select Knob Selecting Sealant Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this G ealant Hosea position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant 7 Air Pump Hos
109. the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer Fr
110. tion For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Release the clutch pedal 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis abled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting Electronic Stability Control ESC If Equipped This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path
111. tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean
112. to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid
113. touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF with Keyless Enter N Go and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go opening the driver s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON RUN engine stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound Refer to Start ing Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle
114. towing speed must not exceed 65 mph 105 km h e There is no limitation on towing distance WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flashers B if Your Engine Overheats E TIREFIT Kit If Equipped TIREFITStorage TIREFIT Usage Precautions Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 367 367 368 369 369 371 373 H Jacking And Tire Changing Road Tire Installation Bl jump Starting Procedures lll Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage Preparations For Jacking Jacking And Changing A Tire Preparations For Jump Start Jump Starting Procedure 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Mmm W Shift Lever Override aaa 393 Manual Transmission 397 E Towing A Disabled Vehicle 395 Without The Key Fob 397 Automatic Transmission 396 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel A flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Press the switch to
115. turn on the Hazard Warning This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under
116. turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition in the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay inter
117. use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time 324 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread
118. warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States 0 0 00 MRXCAWA4MAA Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L And 5 7L Engine With Automatic Transmission The 3 6L and 5 7L engine with automatic transmission is designed to meet all emis 89 sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us 800dfab ing high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
119. while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Front Jacking Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE caution MEE SAT e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the ias e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use spare tire is mounted incorrectly Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered
120. y EE Re EERYS S 367 TOWNE acit Daae eer VRE AS ea ans 395 Emission Control System Maintenance 405 Engine separei 4 4 be dg ta eye UBER E DNE 403 Air Cleaner 2 a ieee te ea eee ees 411 Block Heater i e com eee 274 Break In Recommendations 79 Checking Oil Level pss rrie kkaa adiasa 408 ee INDEX 485 Compartment iesi aes 402 403 Compartment Identification 402 Coolant Antifreeze lessen 420 451 Cooling zc aea kini DR Rh RATS Re 420 Exhaust Gas Caution llus 80 345 Fails to Start 3 4 xcu eso te dere es 272 Flooded Starting 005 272 Fuel Requirements llle 341 Jump Starting sansa cee em 3E ER 388 COU Gorka es e uM LOS Re 408 450 451 Oil Change Interval llle 409 Oi Filler Cap 2e 3 cgase coh gue epus 410 OIL Filter zu scere oeque de repite 411 Oil Filter Disposal 0 411 Oil Selection 2 66 cee cee eee 409 450 Oil SYMEUC used pi eee Cee oe a 411 Overheating xs ev iade Ke qus 367 Staring cesa sand eed d redii d ed 266 Temperature Gauge 00004 191 Engine Oil Viscosity 25 rese oe Pane x aes 410 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 0 410 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System Illuminated 21 Ethanol scant bed Hee bh Ae att aes eats 342 Event Data Recorder 0 00000 cues 69 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 000 4 80 345 Exhaust Syste
121. you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity Lamps llle A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 DoorCourtesy c eek ae a eR XE 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID D15 Serviced at Auth
122. 032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE ransmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test RKE transmitter operation General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter
123. 3 WARNING Continued 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Continued e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR featur
124. 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blo
125. 47 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N C E C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Meliclee s 2o Ses a ae ees ema D LOC 471 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 473 Prepare For The Appointment 471 dervice Contract vise eee sed e RSS 473 Prepare A List 00 000 0 ee 471 Wi Warranty Information 474 Be Reasonable With Requests 471 BMOPAR Parts 474 H if You Need Assistance 000 471 W Reporting Safety Defects 474 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 472 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center
126. 5 The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy
127. 9 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 451 CEM a iq obusceien ded see ua gans ios i Engihe ice ener wed RR REY EE 451 License Lamp 6 00000 eeee 449 H Fluid Capacities 252 9 es 450 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 074438716 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 9010 Q 5 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Engine Oil Fill 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations
128. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg ee STARTING AND OPE
129. Anti Lock Brake System ABS If BI Sport Mode If Equipped 00000 289 Equipped uses cce em xe pSERMPES 298 H Driving On Slippery Surfaces 290 li Electronic Brake Control System 301 Acceleration sess peor PERDRE BERE 290 mou s dM suu 301 Traction sauce x RERRO ONERE RR ev 291 Traction Control System TCS Bl Driving Through Water 291 If Equipped 22a au es o ELAS denies 302 Flowing Rising Water 292 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 302 H Power Steering ces isnesue ew ieese does 294 Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Parks Bake NR 295 Pasion DU 4 Serer ate Manual Transmission If Equipped 296 E iiid a na a T 305 Ae UI c HS i ones a ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 307 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Synchronizing ESC 00 0 309 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 324 H Tire Safety Information csse e e 309 Tite Spinni g s ste 0 944056 eee eee RS 325 Tire Markings coded ba ce SOROR SUR ee she 309 Tread Wear Indicators llus 326 Tire Terminology And Definitions 314 Like OR Tine 1 dor ices aig nth eso een odes 326 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 315 Replacement Tires 0 00000 327 Wi Tires General Information
130. BE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fu
131. CS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stabil ity features of ESC function normally When in Partial Off mode the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Lo d Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this 308 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e T
132. D LIGNE M noy VEXTLATING FAN WOOR LOCA SHROTTLE FOUR WHEEL PATONG TAA DEFRIIST LOWER AR OUTLET CONTROL DNE BRAAT rma jj TOW Ae qv Anes hs Au GRATE vemor Wut WerRUMENT PANEL uamwitoos TUPECK MACONDTON OIRD SENT nein vanwe TOW MALL jA A E weo0f5o81 amp 50 A amp LOWER ANCHORE GLOW PLUG E Rum bey i m JWE ARBAR ARBG suana rrer CHLOREN ATEM B FAZASI ot m SRS E c C E MX 5 Aa lt gt id M psa S MALFUNCTION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL fABSBENGOER DOOR ALAR COwvERTIELE CONVERTIBLE SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC WOICATORUGHT olyema IEUPERAJPE RESTAT SYTE AAAA OFF TEOM m Miso COMDTNMER CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION EBENEN WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title VIN Location The vehicle identification number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside
133. G AND OPERATING ME Gear Range DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NINOS NEUTRAL into another gear range e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking This range supplements the parking brake by locking the brake fully when E E guard against vehicle transmission The engine can be started in this range mavemient and possible injury dr damage Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK When parking on a level surface you may place the shift Make sure the transmission is in PARK before lever in the PARK position first and then apply the leaving the vehicle parking brake Continued When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure or NEUTRAL i
134. GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1076 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small a
135. IC from odometer to Trip Odometer A to Trip Odometer B and back to odometer Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the displayed trip odometer to 0 miles km The trip odometer must be displayed to reset it 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light 4 This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is on 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 6 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem
136. ICLE ME MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Inside Day Night Mirror 030407085 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped CAUTION This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror Alight spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right mirror clean of the button does not illuminate Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror 92 UNDERSTANDING THE
137. ING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will re
138. IOD Cavity 1 of the Pink Equipped Rear Power Distri 6 20 Amp Fuel Pump bution Center con Yellow tains a black IOD z TE fuse needed for ve i m E n P B hicle processing dur ing assembly The service replacement part is a 60 Amp yel low cartridge fuse 8 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Con Blue nector DLC Wireless Control Module WCM Wireless Ignition 2 40 Amp Integrated Power Node WIN G Module IPM reen odule IPM 9 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 um Yellow p tegrated Power Green Module IPM z e EE Natural Equipped 11 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 12 20 13 21 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control 22 Red Cluster Security 23 Module If 24 EX Equipped 25 15 20 Amp Active Damper If Yellow Equipped 26 16 20 Amp Heated Seat Module 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow If Equipped Red Controller ORC 17 20 Amp Instrument Cluster 28 10 Amp Ignition Run AC Yellow Red Heater Control 18 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Instru B EE Yellow ment Panel 19 10 Amp Stop Lights Red 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
139. L will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 your vehicle Refer to these
140. Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 8 000 miles 13 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate
141. Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Headlights On With Wipers handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of Available With Automatic Headlights Only the steering column When this feature is active the headlights will turn on a
142. ND WASHERS XX The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column inter m E pusu OFF X97 a QT MS l WIPER AH 031669008 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the
143. NT PANEL 13 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con E trol ESC is off OFF 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 15 High Beam Indicator HD This indicator will turn on when the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in ON RUN A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu ously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information 17 Shift Lever Indicator Automatic Transmission Only The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument clust
144. Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle
145. RAL Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions relatively With the clutch engaged clutch pedal released but it steady speeds may result in increased fuel economy may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM Also this may be more noticeable when the transmis sion is warm This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or NOTE transmission Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired acceleration rate Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse 4 4 Skip Shift inhibitor system When vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE When at a complete stop you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE There are times when you must shift the transmission directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear This is to help you get the best 278 STARTING AND OPERATING EE possible fuel economy from your vehicle This occurs when the engine coolant antifreeze is higher than 106 F MARSNING 41 C vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph 30 km h Skipping more than one gear while downshifting but less than 21 mph 34 km h and the transmission is could cause you to lose control of your vehicle You in first gear and the accelerator is at 1 4 throttle orless could have a collision The 1 4 Skip Shift Indicator Message will be displayed during these times CAUTION
146. RAL NOT ALLOWED e 65 mph 105 km h maximum speed Dolly Tow Front Not Recommended NOT ALLOWED Rear Not Recommended Not Recommended On Trailer All OK OK Automatic Transmission If Equipped Recreational towing with rear wheels on the ground is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for tow ing this vehicle behind another vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground Use of a towing dolly with rear wheels on the ground is NOT ALLOWED as severe transmission damage will occur Use of a towing dolly with front wheels on the ground is not recommended as vehicle damage may occur 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require Manual transmission vehicles may also be towed using a vehicle trailer with all four wheels off the ground Use of a towing dolly is not recommended as vehicle damage may occur ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Manual Transmission If Equipped Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require Vehicles with a manual transmission may be flat towed ments can cause severe engine or transmission dam with all four wheels on the ground under the following age Damage from improper towing is not covered conditions under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The
147. RATING 317 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflate
148. RNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Continued driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside T
149. RSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 CAUTION Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufactur er s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BISA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BISA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio devic
150. SSORY ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will result in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207467 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Keyless Enter N Go system the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Underst
151. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 168 UNDERSTANDING THE
152. TRUMENT PANEL ME lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped ecs esu E n RE Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped 2 o n lll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 220 222 225 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC 0 0 000 226 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 226 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MPS Audio Play is sace RES dchE 232 Notes On Playing MP3Files 234 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 236 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 236 Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped senner ge Sep RE ESQSERa E ES 237 H iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 241 Connecting The iPod Or External USB uon cM ME 242 Using This Feature 0 243 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 251 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 243 Play Mode e026 4 6 expen doceo duet 243 List Or Browse Mod
153. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only 1 With the vehicle stopped place the shift lever in NEUTRAL then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then apply the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 NOTE Keyless Enter N Go Functions With Driver s Foot e If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position the OFF The Brake Pedal Clutch Pedal In PARK Or system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of NEUTRAL Position inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an position ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h and the engine is not running e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h the e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC seconds before the engine will shut off The ignition displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY switch position will re
154. UDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone Features Of Your Vehicle in Understanding The iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ
155. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact t
156. ailure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command ve button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command amp vR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command AVR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand amp VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Univ
157. alant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if avail able Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 sec onds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from ap proximately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pr
158. all Features llle 104 Uconnect Phone Features 107 Advanced Phone Connectivity 112 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone ps sasare tti aeia 114 General Information 125 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es ll Voice Command If Equipped 125 NLIh esiste Ree ee ea 142 Voice Command System Operation 125 Headlights And Parking Lights 142 Commands x ovs esed RR E 126 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 143 Voice Training llle 130 Headlights On With Wipers Available With D NNNM CREE ia ORE en edunt iil Power Seats csse jp Ae See oaeueSdqinsip b id Heated Seats jivGuwes whee s ew beers 133 D yume Nun Lighe s TCEQUDDSOS pee T8 Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment 134 Lights On Reminder 145 Manual Front Seatback Recline 135 Fog ag S H Eppe anias a Passenger Seat Easy Entry isses 136 Multifunction Lever 000 146 Head Restraints 00000000 ju A a a E Eia ji Folding Rear Seat sss iij Bene Change SE oo dis sancii e High Low Beam Switch 147 ll To Open And Close The Hood 141 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
159. an cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed engine running for an extended period If the against you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 346 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaus
160. and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive 4 and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi
161. anding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE The power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power out lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either e jump Start the vehicle e Charge the battery WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the key fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle Continued access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to
162. andle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is sele
163. anel severe injuries in a collision The air bags work Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Continued In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing
164. arning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Low Fuel Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss the ignition is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning c
165. ase Sliding Console Armrest Console Storage The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest and also contains a 12 Volt power outlet a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins The center console may also be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface UCI 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and WARNI iPhone devices Refer to Universal Consumer Interface NING UCI If Equipped in Understanding Your Instru Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment Panel for further information ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Center Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these caution
166. atalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass Display Outside Temperature Display e Trip Computer Functions 4 e Uconnect phone If Equipped 041038791 e Uconnect gps Screens If Equipped Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Audio Mode Display This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Surround Sound Modes if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS e System Status 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by MENU Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the MENU button to access wheel the main menu or to return to the main menu from the sub menus
167. ate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary O O C O C ood od Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregu
168. ats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supp
169. attery is stored under an access cover in the trunk 1 Remote Positive Post Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the _2 Remote Negative Post engine compartment for jump starting 390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park WARNING the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNING moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391 CAUTION Failure to follow these procedu
170. ause dam Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 294 STARTING AND OPERATING POWER STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of ma
171. ave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Ii 12D491 126 AC 3rd Edition P rinted in U S A
172. aying MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc form
173. be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the PARK ASSIST SERVICE message to be displayed in the EVIC On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable e Drivers must be careful when backing up even to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driv
174. be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button resu
175. be turned to the ON RUN or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position E STARTING AND OPERATING 281 The electronically controlled transmission provides a will manually select the transmission gear and will precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are display that gear in the instrument cluster as 4 3 2 1 self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift Shift Lever lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position 282 STARTIN
176. c teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in c
177. c during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a d label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label etc 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side
178. com mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a reg
179. ct System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm
180. ct Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure
181. cted the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlamps On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlamps Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO A position the headlamps will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and
182. ctions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it w
183. d Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm To Open The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to open the trunk If equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2
184. d S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between 4 and 4 In very cold weather les if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures ades ks asa eves rx 266 W Engine Block Heater If Equipped 274 Manual Transmission If Equipped 266 WiManual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped 267 Six Speed Manual Transmission Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped 268 W Automatic Transmission If Equipped 279 Normal Starting 04 269 Key Ignition Park Interlock 280 Extreme Cold Weather Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 280 BROW eR OP 2D he Sen epi e Five Speed Automatic Transmission 280 If Engine Fails To Start 272 Gide RANEY e cs coy rus quA RE ONES 282 After Starting cu uuu eoe cer ERE 274 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Bg AutoStick i1 osos e een 287 W Brake System 4s IRR 298 Operation se 287
185. d placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit u
186. d tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued 320 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases
187. d use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service lif
188. e 245 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 247 ll Harman Kardon Logic7 High Performance Multichannel Surround Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS If Eq ipped ike det ie he e d 248 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls If Equipped eed reme 250 Radio Operation 04 4 250 CD Player ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones Bl Climate Controls Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation llle Blower Control Manual Operation setes eise mittens giis ps Operating Tips 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040163502 1 Air Outlets 6 ESC OFF Switch 11 Ignition Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Sport Button 12 Trunk Release Button 3 Glove Compartment 8 Hazard Warning Switch 13 Headlight Switch 4 Radio 9 Heated Steering Wheel Switch 5 Heated Seat Switch 10 Climate Control UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040340708 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position 2 Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the odometer line bottom line in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EV
189. e e To call one of the names in the list press the t VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp s button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and a
190. e Black wa and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant 8 Power Plug Abe Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Using The Deflation Button P Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air Selecting Air Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this position O y for air pump operation only Use the Black Air MM Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated NEEE X XXX AJU WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 TIREFIT Usage Precautions Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the sys tem Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use After each use always replace these components immediately at an authorized dealer When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peel
191. e and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light 334 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IV The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pres sure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended col
192. e from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE 1st Gear Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability WARNING Program or T
193. e vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable Battery Location clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead
194. e Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone button and Voice Com mand AVR button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra i VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wai
195. e Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button e RKE PANIC button not pressed x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice if e Battery at an acceptable charge level and System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in Off position Keyless Enter N Go E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START STOP button twice or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle e Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two second
196. e inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about Tire and Loading Information Placard Location the NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed i uote vede on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the 2 total weight your vehicle can carry driver s side door 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and Tire and Loading Information Placard spare tires Loading PE i The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed SEAMING CAPACITY TOTAL 3 the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You NEED O a will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR
197. e letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M CAUTION Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels as this can result in rear axle damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary compact spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE SIZING TERMS Service Description
198. e of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to 055007576 1 Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure 2 New Tire You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability
199. e or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5
200. e or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio system with GreenEdge technology that offers superior sound quality higher Sound Pressure Levels SPL and reduced energy consumption The new system utilizes proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver ing substantial increases in component and system effi ciency levels E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7 4 channel playback architecture The Harman Kardon audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source The GreenEdge high efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy namic sound quality The speakers are tuned for maxi mum efficiency and perfectly
201. e rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in go
202. e vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 4m 030907490 Push Button NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints The center rear head restraint has two positions up or down When the seat is being occupied the head restraint should raised When there are no occupants in the center seat position the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seat restraint To lower the head restraint press the push The
203. eE 22 45 nbek ESS Ru eA E ORT ea ox 38 Windshield Defroster Less 82 256 Windshield Washers less 148 150 Fiad 4 4 52 eaaa eb Patek a 416 Windshield Wiper Blades 416 Windshield Wipers ce ecseri akit 000000 cae 148 Wiper Blade Replacement 416 Wiper Delay avs cn eh wae wad ee Rae ee sES 149 Wipers Intermittent 000 149 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing W
204. ection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Continued 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
205. ed Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service a
206. ed off and properly discarded e For optimum performance make sure the valve stem P P on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit e You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1 4 in 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle e Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the Wheel road to avoid the danger of being hit when using Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat the TIREFIT kit source Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you I
207. edal or the shift lever Continued do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury 208 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating
208. ediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door open ing NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to
209. eels ie one taba ou eee eee Ua eA 433 Windshield Wiper Blades 416 OK 24 eere eei en evene 218 227 Cold Weather Operation 0040 272 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 251 Compact Spare Tire cscs cessisset eee 323 COmpasS cuc er eeerqeLASseHE DRY SES 210 Compass Calibration liess 210 Compass Variance llle ee 211 Computer Trip Travel ses reeset es naset 205 en INDEX 483 Connector MCL ric sente aes ave e a NAE AME any 241 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 241 Conserving Fuel 44e 3 kee dwa Rs 205 Console irtiri 4m br RE esis 181 Console Floor kinnt ea a iaa 181 Console Overhead leen 163 Contract Service d PIEK OPES VEEE 473 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 423 Cooling System sisipe si taika en eee 420 Adding Coolant Antifreeze lis 422 Coolant Capacity oseese cus llle 450 Coolant Level atra tya 420 423 Disposal of Used Coolant 423 Drain Flush and Refill 421 Inspection x sd soca OES oe eed 423 Points to Remember 424 Pressure Cap um cerei x rre 423 Radiator Cap saec 9ae ves arditas 423 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 421 450 451 Corrosion Protection 0000 e ee eee 430 Cuse ACNE uoce ee oh etn Ree ale See aes 190 Cupholders cise ds zc Sit wale Terris 180 436 Customer Assistance ce eee eee 471
210. efer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4
211. ehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear a chime turn the Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either engine OFF immediately and call for service indicator flashes at a rapid rate 10 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds Q asa bulb check when the ignition switch is first A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or turned to the ON RUN Haad If the light is others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on WARNING either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will CR sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critically h
212. ehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate mH e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa
213. el MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ME can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions c
214. el them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Ai Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a NOTE means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat re
215. elt which could result in serious injury or death Recline Lever 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Seat Easy Entry On the passenger seat pull forward on the lever located on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback and slide the seat forward You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way This allows for easier access to the rear seat To return the seat to a normal seating position first return the seatback to its original recline location and then slide the entire seat back to the pre set lock position Easy Entry Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Head Restraints Active Head Restraints Front Seats f The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Active Head Resttaints AHIR Im he event of a dear by ide And E i y Bp m M impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward kW ACRI Uno ep MADRE Qd M P minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear head and the AHR E WARNING The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating th
216. ely affected and or objects Air Bags could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB air bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of i
217. ems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the foll
218. engine press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and holding the ENGINE START STOP button Release the button when the engine starts If the vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds release the button wait 10 270 STARTING AND OPERATING EE to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting proce dure If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting release the button To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a VEHICLE NOT IN PARK message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position
219. ent that may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 300 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an Anti Lock Brake System ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The Anti Lock Brake System ABS Warning Light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The
220. er It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 19 Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The trip odometer shows indi vidual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The EVIC features a driver interactive display for further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions includ
221. er looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING Continued HomeLink button and a power sunroof switch may also be included if equipped e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights 033309453 OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and sunglass storage Universal Garage Door Opener At the forward end of the overhead console are two c
222. er vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further informa tion vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter is in the passenger compart ment Installing And Removing The ENGINE START STOP Button In
223. ersal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vn button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 system is speaking Please note the volume setting for e Next Station to select the next station Voice Command is different than the audio system 2 M eed un i e Previous Station to select the previous station Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vr 6 Radan Nieu po SWEN sone ranig menu button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main e Main Menu to switch to the main menu EI cH Radio FM In this mode you can say the following commands To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In Radio io switcha the tadio mode this mode you may say the following commands e Disc to switch to the disc mode Preem ar MocchanpedthednegHericy Mt s Hp s Mni ew to de memo mordet e Next Station to select the next station u e Previ tion lect thi i ti e Setup to switch to system setup revious Station to select the previous station Radio AM To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM Ine Main Menu to switch to the main menu this mode you may sa
224. essure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pres sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instrument panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Vehicle CAUTION e The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit D Drive Vehicle Imm
225. etract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The c
226. even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism B1f31bcb Emergency Release Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB for the driver and front outboard passenger An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
227. ever under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the po
228. ever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status
229. evere transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode refer to AutoStick in this section to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward
230. f of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the
231. f the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal Continued those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine off When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in the PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Continued 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued CAUTION e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with o Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a position to the ON RUN position and also press number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key f
232. f will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the u
233. facturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621
234. fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or i confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon ML oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood cloud injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Hazard switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch To Enter Remot
235. few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss mode In Play mode the following
236. fthe puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 in 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure Continued If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage Continued en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 WARNING Continued Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed Hazard Warning flashers through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the water if there is any contact with eyes or skin deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the contact with clothing valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil i pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the dren If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with Valve s
237. g Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 022636908 Tether Strap Mounting A Tether Strap Hook B Tether Anchor 1 Cover 3 Attaching Strap
238. g booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact ENING IEKCOREITTUCC the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument ander You Need Assistance panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air WARNING Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument p
239. g brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline STARTING AND OPERATING 275 NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid e Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch warms up This is normal pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Hill Start Assist in Start ing and Operating for further information Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving as this may result in transmission syn chronizer damage Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear wheels are spinning due to loss of traction Dam age to the transmission may occur X Manual Shifter 051705511 705511 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the accelerator pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal Damage to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal when shifting The six speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near thi
240. gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the engine OFF 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Aut
241. gin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the amp ver button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say mm Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the amp button to begin 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Se button at any time wh
242. h Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the p
243. h a single chime ESC Off Electronic Stability Control is deactivated ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped Check Gascap Key Fob Battery Low Service Keyless System Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not Programmed Vehicle Not in Park Key Fob Not Detected e Press Brake amp Push Button to Start e Push Button or Insert Key Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e 1 4 SKIPSHIFT Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START
244. h to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when thei
245. hart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR Third Row N A N A N A e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5
246. he ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the isi eo Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Synchronizing ESC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION If the power supply is interrupted battery 5 disconnected or discharged the ESC Tire Markings Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible s 95H May ORDMNAX Lo e 40 a 81f05e05 1 U S DOT Safety 4 Maximum Load Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 310 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have th
247. he Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 476 Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of al
248. he Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bi Mirrors Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors If Equipped Vanity Mirrors Illuminated Vanity Mirrors BU Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of SUN VISOF sila dk eR UR pis 94 connect Phone If Equipped 95 Operation seca isi son a ease ads 97 Phone C
249. he emergency number as follows e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Mexico City in Mexico Please r
250. he engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O O C O O O O O oo M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center ees MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule T Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E Q Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before N filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km A T Ro
251. he reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap
252. he type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The
253. he vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft Ibs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389 CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 060836876 Preparations For Jump Start Remote Battery Posts The b
254. hicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary
255. ic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK but
256. icants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard If Equipped or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated failure This could result in a collision volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only the spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Flu the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Vehicle for further information taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Manual Transmission
257. ice onte ud Bee 190 Materials Added 004 344 Methanol b taut r eau vee oe oo 342 Octane Rating 005 341 451 Requirements sis sei s Baa a e eee eee 341 Saver Mode sse 205 Specifications sicsee ee ens 451 Tank Capacity s ki meo xr eed eges 450 Fuel Optimizer s assa ie RR Rowe Rn 205 Fuel Saver vac sic ser Shae e Erg 205 Fuel System Caution 0 00 00 0000 347 Fuelinig iuum tae aye Rem aee RR Ree E ees 346 jr M p TT 436 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 164 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap s 346 404 Gasoline Eu 1 2222 ERREUR 341 CONSERVING is dd seed d REESE Rete n 205 Gasoline Clean Air si oszsrzis ce fe 342 Gasoline Reformulated 342 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle 191 Fuel iv gcc ea ae RR RAS oe ee Se E 190 Odometer susra aea EROR weeks e uu 195 Speedometer 0 00000 190 Tachometer 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee ae 190 Gear Ranges 1 ee 282 Gear Select Lever Override 393 General Information 18 27 125 340 General Maintenance 000000 eee 407 Glass Cleaning s ss kes an ex tae ea s 435 Gross Axle Weight Rating 349 352 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 349 351 GVWR 2zxk emee EE VERERRR NES oe bie 349 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 95 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water sse as
258. iently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread lif
259. ile the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the e vR button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the vr button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before rese
260. ime display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file syst
261. ing brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped wit
262. ing mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 206 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake Release Parking Brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake p
263. ing the mirror cover upward Power Mirror Control 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Illuminated Vanity Mirrors Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use Visor the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is Close the mirror cover to turn off the light parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod Extender Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sio
264. ing the door This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and seal damage To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with one window open then open the other window to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to mini mize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button The button is located on the instrument panel to the
265. inuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the A
266. ion Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setu fi Salact Audio dio SMS incomi Ea Announcement lagola Now prone wil temparaniv Gieect a Ingens English Espanol ne Francais Gontimatian Premnts m EEJ 4 diat im Lists pin EA Enter Hame of prone sm Follow prompte t complote pairing override phone mes Selen phane to be deleted Prone Deleted All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main me
267. ion may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody prot
268. ion of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram E s XE 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 331 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to pr
269. ipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Rear Side Marker Lamp 1 Remove the front rear side marker Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side to disengage the clip NOTE e f a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint 2 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 4 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the front rear side marker Tail Turn And Stop Lamp 1 Open the trunk 2 Using a screwdriver remove the tail lamp retainer ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 3 Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 6 Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to assembly access the bulbs 812c4b54 4 Pull back the trunk liner 7 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 5 Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the 8 Disconnect the electrical connector tail lamp assembly 9 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp a
270. is mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 The ESC Off switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESC ON again mo mentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC ON again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited wheel spin feature described in the T
271. is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After placing the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
272. isplay you may select one of three lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the Uconnect gps if equipped Press the SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you continue the informa tion will display in the selected language ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 NOTE The EVIC will not change the Uconnect lan guage selection Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected both doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger door When All Doors 1st Press is selected both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door h
273. ithin 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Pl
274. k for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the fol lowing audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights will turn on park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after an additional 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Press the LOCK button on the exterior
275. ke pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per WARNING forming underhood services e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the MAX mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may can severely damage your brake system and or cause leaking in the system impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a Continued leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubr
276. l tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road chara
277. lar wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid L O O C C O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 459 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace t
278. le Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED _ on off 2 RES When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over 4 CANCEL 3 SET accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec O tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should
279. life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limite
280. locked in the vehicle To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button on the located on the center of the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the license plate 021836568 Trunk Passive Entry Button NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors 021836568 Outside Door Handle Lock Button 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interi
281. lothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The system
282. lts in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift l
283. ly A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about hal
284. m lt e satyna tia 2c e eee eae 80 417 Exterior Folding Mirrors llle 92 Exterior Lighting 0 00 00 eee 142 Exterior Lights i1a 4 gone oo ive ae es 84 Filler Location Fuel 0 0 0 0 000 eee 346 Filters Ait Cleaner 425242 pea 411 Air Conditioning lille 259 Engine Oll i ce oo edes wee sS 411 451 Engine Oil Disposal 411 Flash To Pass Flashers Hazard Warning 0 0 2 367 Turn Signal 52 29 ns 84 146 192 Flat Tire Changing 0 000000 e eee 379 Flooded Engine Starting 272 Fluid Capacities sre ure dece ainet dern eS 450 Elud Eeaks sce o bete ai deter Peto 84 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 429 Brake 22a Yee rer orba red Eu Ras 425 Cooling System asees uane hi iai 420 Engine Qil sse kr mk n es 408 Eh d Brake 5x2 e c XY e S 452 FRIAS 5 cea dac eR eaae ER e De es 451 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 451 Fog Lights sese t eee ae 145 195 Folding Rear Seat ce RR ERES 139 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 392 Puel veciaaesaee Red aeY era baa eh as 341 Adding zen utes quc bas Aas Bsa ak Bo 346 Additives 2202220024080 00544 R54 344 Clean Ai s esd aries ooh Sa ew he ERE 342 CONSCIVING re cider ae tide whee a 205 Ethanol ied eee SUP Ede ir 342 Filler Cap Gas Cap isssss 346 Gasoline ses c c ERRP gue wed ed ode 341 GauBE iin and Se acit ee Bi
285. main in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice eue ENGINES kr Duktor second a to the OFF position to change the ignition switch to the ON RUN position P EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC VOSEININIIS GO RH Sd displays IGNITION MODE OFF e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C transmission cannot be started this way Unburned To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once an externally powered electric engine block heater avail the engine has started ignite and damage the able from your authorized dealer is recommended converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis If Engine Fails To Start charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery WARNING in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into ing in What to Do In Emergencies for further information the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING
286. matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi seat surround sound processing Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology deliv ers an immersive accurate sound stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or dashboard AUX input and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel Selecting Surround Sound through the DSS modes activates the Harman Kardon Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology in your vehicle Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Surround Sound mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches Siem 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of th
287. me and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this e
288. mission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid CAUTION leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio CAUTION ration in transmission shift quality and or torque me converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as other than that recommended by the manufacturer will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level damage to the transmiss
289. mmends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The towing speed must not exceed 65 mph 104 km h There is no limitation on towing distance If the trans mission is not operable then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Without The Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 3 6L 402 W Maintenance Procedures 407 Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L 403 Fngin Dil i3 uaa dus Bad eee ee hoe d 408 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 404 Engine Oil Filter cies 411 Loose Fuel Filler Cap 404 Engine Air Cleaner Filter
290. move the fastener securing the spare tire Spare Tire Fastener 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381 WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the m edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas Jack Fastener 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Set the parking brake Place the shift lever into PARK Turn OFF the ignition oT A C N 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 060505162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Carefully f
291. moving slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Lockin
292. mpact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi N mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuous
293. n Malfunction Indicator 199 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 197 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 197 331 Traction Control ille 307 Turn Signal 5 sss ee nn 84 146 192 Vanity Mirror ea a a ea 94 Voltage s sacco bee auldeas Emi dining aeons 190 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 190 Loading Vehicle isses 349 350 Capacities cs eene Sureste det tough sans 350 Tes d REFIERE EE LEE 315 LOCKS ue pne CR xen RUE nane 31 Auto Unlock 2 2 9 r m s 33 Automatic Door llle 33 a INDEX 491 DOOE 2 iuc nc btwn keme e ERR ac n 31 Mini Trip Computer s s secese tess taisei as 205 Power Door 3 5 6 3 Sia aids aad aa ASSES 320 IMIEEOIS s 53 dese Robe bean aries BR ES 90 Low Tire Pressure System 005 331 Automatic Dimming sss 91 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Electric Powered llle 92 LATCH s 4 3 40444 kg ck ee 3X y CER es 74 75 Electric Remote 0 0 0 00 cee eee 92 Lubrication Body aca ne casas gee ga kas 415 Exterior FOldING xac due goa e eo 92 Heated 4542231459434 9884444 48 PEASE ES 93 Maintenance Free Battery 04 412 OUtSIde deos he etes d emt 91 Maintenance Procedures lilius 407 Vay cess ani Uere ertum a Ve Ne US 94 Maintenance Schedule Liu 454 Mode Maintenance General 000000 eee 407 EuelSavef leac kk nee eae ses ad 205 Maintenance Su
294. n most garage door opener models manufactured NOTE after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas e The term IC before the certification registration num can cause serious injury or death ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 1 This device may not cause harmful interference e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun WARNING visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You co
295. n 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phon
296. n INDEX 499 Turn Signals iaces xx anes en IM Pee 146 192 UCI Connector i 9 I es 241 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 95 Uniform Tire Quality Grades sesso enere seras 477 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 241 Universal Transmitter 00 164 Unleaded Gasoline 00 20005 341 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 51 Vanity MITTOTS sest epa aiat eee 94 Variance Compass 6 6 cee ee 211 Vehicle Certification Label 349 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 05 315 349 350 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage aee mI AD ed 258 443 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Viscosity Engine Oil si sse emnes 410 Voice Recognition System VR 125 Warning Flasher Hazard 6 367 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 190 Warnings and Cautions 0040 6 Warranty Information 00 474 Washer Adding Fluid 0 0005 416 Washers Windshield 148 150 416 Washing Vehicle llle 431 Water Driving Through i e RR RE 291 Wheel and Wheel Trim 04 433 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 433 500 INDEX eee Wind Buffeting cien RES 40 175 Window Fogging eee 259 WindOWS gt lt 3 quz eru Soi ab deo Sara ae qa 38 POW
297. n as possible by blotting e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use with a clean dry towel MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel CAUTION For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These remove soap residue products may damage the wheel s protective finish e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically re
298. n throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es should be considered a normal part of the break in and WARNING Continued not interpreted as an indication of difficulty e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFETY TIPS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside
299. nd engine oil J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km J Replace the air conditioning filter T Flush and replace the engine coolant at l Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary whichever comes first M Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km J Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system 1 Change the automatic transmission
300. nd medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Continued 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch clas
301. ne and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Load ing Informa
302. neuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrume
303. ng the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types
304. ning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device es UNDE
305. not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE w
306. nroof 00000005 175 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 199 405 Monitor Tire Pressure System 331 Manual Transmission 274 427 430 Mopar Parts s soies ieoa eee 406 474 Fluid Level Check 004 427 430 MTBEZETBE m x kB RI 342 Manual Service llle 475 Multi Function Control Lever 146 Map Reading Lights 147 163 Master Cylinder Brakes 425 New Vehicle Break In Period 79 Methanol 0 000 cee ee eee 342 492 INDEX ME Occupant Restraints ce sss oaeee yeee 42 62 66 Occupant Restraints Sedan 59 60 62 65 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 341 451 Odometer ees 190 195 THD o3 zb ek ERREUR E ERR ea 190 195 Oil Change Indicator 004 204 Oil Change Indicator Reset 204 Oil Filter Change ser I mh 411 Oil Filter Selection llle 411 Oil Engin sos eee e Rees 408 451 Capacity as anyone ch oe dives deed es qodus 450 Change Interval sells 409 Checking gegia sire ore iet ae tie xe s 408 Dipstick s src er sere es 408 Disposal 24 sees sa ae ear E ee HE S xS 411 Filter serens Kh ea Ge a GEA are sx 411 451 Filter Disposal ee x eh ee Re 411 Identification Logo eee 409 Materials Added to 0 000000 0 411 Recommendation ls
307. nstrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 15 Hr 5 M ev AS is Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 11 040506040 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 Press the UP or DOWN button until COMPASS VARIANCE message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the MENU button to exit System Warnings Customer Information Features Press and release the MENU button until SYSTEM WARNINGS displays in the EVIC Then press the Up or DOWN button to display any one of the following choices e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Language When in this d
308. nswer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EvR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Togeling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the be button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp e button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way
309. nt Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK or REVERSE manual transmission only position When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is in the ON position RUN position with Keyless Enter N Go the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front mm wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission lock
310. nterior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your c
311. ntinued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the
312. nts 00 0 70 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make ll Engine Break In Recommendations 79 Otro Tine VORIGIS seq peo aap aeaa tae 84 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 1 OFF 2 ACCE
313. nu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no Uconnect Tutorial other try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead F
314. o the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconne
315. o to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD m Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing t
316. oStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position or tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles if equipped When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles if equipped unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen except as described below An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the in strument cluster when using AutoStick to alert the driver to upshift to the next gear The UPSHIFT message will appear when approaching the maximum engine speed If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode the transmission will automaticall
317. ob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in s
318. od condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Temperature Control ATC The Automatic Temperature Control system automati
319. ode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 e Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de List Or Browse Mode vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described each track in the current list and then forward to the below will bring up List mode List mode enables next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the desired track when it is playing the track press the audio device SCAN puttan apain Puring Sgan mode pressing the e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ bi in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio ous and next tracks device or external USB device e RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Tur
320. of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements weight on the rear axle of the vehicle To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e The weight of the driver and all passengers e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engi
321. oint in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the bra
322. ollow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383 WARNING Continued CAUTION Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a um Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on jack locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when itis ona Instructions for this vehicle jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic ACIOA Jack Engagement Locations Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
323. om Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the
324. ombination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 400 INDEX ae About Your Brakes sees 295 298 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 298 301 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 422 Adding F el uus io eats mre e 346 Adding Washer Fluid eise ite 416 Additives Fuel lees 344 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 411 Air Conditioner Maintenance 414 Air Conditioning co ewes oy eee oe Ca 252 Air Conditioning Controls 252 Air Conditioning Filter 00 259 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 414 415 Air Conditioning System 252 414 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 260 Air Pressure Tires d abata ia ratik 320 Aifb g net lc E aceto ore d eU pd 56 65 Airbag Deployment s c terc pace ena 66 Airbag Light i2 cens 63 64 68 82 192 Airbag Maintenance sssr saidki seata dka n kss 67 Airbag Side ceia 2 ere s 59 62 64 65 Airbag Window Side Curtain 60 62 65 Alarm Security Alarm 000 18 Alarm Light e doa gere eye RR n Sees 197 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alarm Panic seoske d REESE RR Waa ded 25 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio lesse 238 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 298 301 Anti Lock Warning Light 199 300 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm
325. on in the seat s path Heated Seats The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The heaters provide the same average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF If HIGH level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to the LOW level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the LOW level setting also turns OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment WARNING S The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Pull
326. on switch position If desired the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Operat ing for more information NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch position is changed the display always re appears Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If m Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Surround Sound While in the Surround Sound menu press the SELECT button to change surround modes 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the MENU button until Compass displays in the Button NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new
327. one either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach t
328. ont Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an
329. operly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will auto matically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is suffic
330. or and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine WARNING To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again Remember to disconnect the engine block heater After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a WARNING grounded three wire extension cord Six Speed Manual Transmission You or others could be injured if you leave the The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on v hide wasttended without having the patte the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module brake fully applied The parkin
331. or door panel Power Window Switches There is a single window control on the passenger s door WINDOWS trim panel that operates the window on the passenger s Power Windows door The window controls will operate only when the The window controls on the driver s door control both of ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position the door windows en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 60 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened The time for this feature is WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver s door power window switch and passenger door power window switch have an AUTO down fea ture Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automatically e The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door The window will return to its fully closed position after clos
332. or the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second ti
333. orized Dealer Halogen Headlamp 0 0 0 H13 Front Park Turn Lamp 3157A Front Fog Lamp 04 9145 H10 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Side Marker 0 00000000 168 Tail Lampi eec e ht ee eg hk iG boas 3057K Tail Stop Tum Lamp 3057K Rear Side Marker p peeter rrna a 000000000 168 Backup Lamp uu sete pp nS see uc oe nes 921 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License a ers E Rr RR 168 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps If Equipped See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge HID Headlamps If Equipped HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equ
334. orted Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Press the INFO button once more to retu
335. ot If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos sible Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 12 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Lo d Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
336. ot eliminate the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 202 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may c
337. ourtesy reading lights 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push de sign Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels Cow oW 033906001 HomeLink Buttons ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand
338. owing table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 AB AEN 82 9 66 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 SAU IU Ge dn 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc O
339. pen open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Ignition Off Operation CAUTION The power sunroof switches remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp this feature power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced EEECIRIESU POWER SUTEETS f Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets only Do not insert any other object in the power on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar Warranty lighter unit If desired the front power outlet can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power when the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE
340. peration Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME con
341. pon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON and a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The 336 STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following componen
342. pproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the A AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Tilt Steering Column Lever This feature allows you to tilt the steering column To unlock the steering column push the lever downward upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the steering column in position push the lever upward until right side of the steering wheel fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hic
343. pressure The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for Continued determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze p
344. quire more frequent coolant changes ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Cooling System Pressure Cap 5 The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine WARNING inec coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant Do not Use 9 pressure cap other than the one antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en recovery bottle gine damage may result The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child liri or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres Coolant Level sure cap while the system is hot or under
345. quired when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of collision 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 360 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections a
346. r personal injury SPORT MODE IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled dampening system This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations including cornering acceleration and braking There are two modes of opera tion e Automatic Auto Mode This is the default position when vehicle ignition is first turned on This mode will give a sporty but comfortable ride Within this mode the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs includ ing vehicle speed steering inputs braking and accel eration e Sport Mode This mode is driver selectable by the SPORT mode switch on the switch bank This mode will set suspension for maximum performance han dling and is intended for spirited driving 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride SPORT Mode Switch When SPORT mode is enabled a flag will light up in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information AUTO mode will be a more soft touring ride where as SPORT will be a firmer sportier suspension for better handling SPORT mode also affects transmission shifting in either Auto or Manual mode Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Operating for further information In Auto mode the transmission has a sportier more aggres sive shift pattern In Manual mode the transmission will hold gear at
347. r Folding 4 2 die nb kx n m 139 Seatback Release llle 139 THING uon c enne ba ingne db Duende s 130 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 421 451 Selection of Oil lle 409 Sentry Key Immobilizer lille 16 Sentry Key Programming 04 18 Sentry Key Replacement 4 17 Service Assistance llle eee eee 471 Service CONTAC iu id px ean erri teas 473 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lessen 199 Service Manuals sli 475 setting the Clock osse eR e 218 227 settings Personal seepe sem zr ees 212 Shift Indicator Light csse 277 Shift Lever Override 0000005 393 Shif ng oc ref rhesi er rakipi LG a 279 Automatic Transmission ss 279 Shoulder Belts llle 46 Side Airbase iis men Ee eoe daa es 64 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 259 Signals TUM esed ae a a HER 84 146 192 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 290 Snow Chains Tire Chains 328 SHOW TeS i e ec RE UR REESE Ele oo 329 Sound System Kickeb ad es46 6 err e C44 DES aa 248 Spare TE seront rre adi ali RR eee aa 323 324 379 496 INDEX EE Spark Plugs esse Fh ree e Pe ees 451 Specifications Fuel Gasoline lessen 451 Os a teats cet aise eet id ena tcp IE NUN 451 Speed Control Cruise Control 152 Speedomele
348. r back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 85EATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safet
349. r is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a con tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 033309453 Overhead Console Inte
350. r zaera e eua RS dere Sas 190 Sport Mode s s deti SUR 44 84635 ER ER 289 Staring cud sch pe Yrs Eee dS 27 266 Automatic Transmission iss 267 Cold Weather csp eracne ey hes 272 Engine Fails to Start llle 272 Remote iso 9 ke h c dvs Gr EGG 27 Starting and Operating 04 266 Starting Procedures iles 266 Steering Column Controls gt scs ss cceresesa seris 146 Column Lock geween cts Sonat naeg 151 POWER Lco aee d eed Baw we dee e 294 Tilt Column raais rer E tk bea s 151 Wheel Tilt aissei ameaga a ian bt e s T51 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 250 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls sacs seses rangeri sas 250 DLOFAage usse ei MES Ge eae ieee vd doe 443 Storage Vehicle au Aiden gauss has CES des 258 443 Storing Your Vehicle 00005 443 Stuck Freeing cc cee e ee 392 Sum ROOF i rua Fus a RE Ree RS aes 173 Sunglasses Storage llle 164 Sunroof Maintenance llle 175 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 56 Sway Control Trailer liiis 353 Synthetic Engine Oil ee 411 System Remote Starting 00 0 27 Tachometer 0 0 0 0 ee eee 190 Telescoping Steering Column 151 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 252 en INDEX 497 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 191 368 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft Sys
351. raction Control in Starting And Oper Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ating for further information ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could CAUTION explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween REVERSE and DRIVE Ist Gear do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE m If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Remove the shift lever override access cover located to the right of the shift lever 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position engine Off 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the override tab through the access port on
352. raveled for Trip A since the last reset 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Sport Mode This light will illuminate when the sport mode sPogpAV is selected This mode provides performance based tuning For further information refer to Sport Mode in Starting And Operating Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Enter N Go icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position 041008156 Keyless Enter N Go Display The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new igniti
353. rd and fourth gear This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear Make sure you move the shift lever into second or fifth gear If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear CAUTION Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting into REVERSE Failure to do so may result in transmission damage You must always use first gear or Reverse when starting from a standing position Recommended Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in recom mended shift speed chart ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 MANUAL TRANSMISSION with the ignition switch in the ON position RUN RE ENDED SHIFT SPEED position for Keyless Enter N Go as compared to the Axle Rati SOMME e 2 15 2 5 6 ignition LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Eee Enter N Go This is normal operation of the transmis 373 mph 20 25 42 sion reverse inhibitor system ih 32 40 67 e Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain 3 91 mph 20 37 48 you may hear your transmission This can be most km h 32 59 77 noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUT
354. re all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground OO O O O L Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn peris n 9 O0 O Mo ON w oO O Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 6 0 057003765 STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range use the AutoStick mode to select a lower gear range NOTE Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval 362 STARTING AND OPERATING ME specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance inter
355. re the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner FUEL SAUER MODE Hueraese MFG 819793f8 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 819793f4 Fuel Saver Mode Off e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km m estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance t
356. recorded memos e Main menu setup or During the playback you may press the Voice Command amp vr button to stop playing memos You ENGEL Oiseiu 3 proceed by saying one of the following commands In this mode you may say the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo e Language English Next to play the next memo e Language French Previous to play the previous memo e Language Spanish Delete to delete a memo e Tutorial e Delete All to delete all memos e Voice Training Setup NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice To switch to system setup you may say on of the Command ae button first and wait for the beep before following speaking the Barge In commands e Change to setup 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command vr button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user
357. redline during manual shifting shifter or paddle switches DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop Your vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential LSD that reduces but does n
358. reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the au thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle 3 Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealan
359. ree hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your ve
360. res could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cabl
361. retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and belts are designed to go around the large bones of adjust the front seat E your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an
362. rior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se the OFF position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either place the ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is located to the right of the head light switch With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and if equipped the lighting in the door map pockets door handles and cupholders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS A
363. rn to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii
364. rogram ESP Indicator 307 Hood wince nga RARI cia eishay cee nd 141 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 191 Lead Free Gasoline 0 0 0 e eee ee 341 Engine Temperature Warning 193 Leaks Fluid errienta Rx a xn 84 Exte or lag duesgese4 bh oe een we ee eS 84 Lite Of Ties e sanss eee C Rb rg ee es 326 BOS i us ace e te S io e ead eke 145 195 Light Bulbs 22 eps renh EE Bae pE 84 444 Hazard Warning Flasher 367 Headlight Switch ses a cesia ieena a 142 Headlights i aaneen see i nae eee 142 445 Headlights On Reminder 145 Headlights On With Wipers 143 151 HighBeam 44c2 eee piia ewe 147 194 High Beam Indicator 00 194 High Beam Low Beam Select 147 Illuminated Entry 20045 21 Instrument Cluster 05 142 190 Intensity Control llle 148 a a occa auto Cr 147 163 LICENSE 2 eb Sees ee Be RERSQ RP 449 Lights On Reminder 145 Low Fuel 0000 eee eee eee 199 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 199 Map Reading 0000 147 163 Oil Pressute sedet ace RR e PCR ROS 194 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 148 PASSING secar Ra RR ennaa ie 147 490 INDEX EE Reading 332 39 x Re e e san 147 163 Seat Belt Reminder 194 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 197 Service ss deas ee i ae ace KA we RR digi 444 445 Service Engine Soo
365. roper tire inflation pressure for those tires 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may
366. rus denesep nate na 291 Hazard Warning Flasher 367 Head Restraints llle 137 Headlights sszrzkere vA ipsi Taina 445 Automate scale UN eo Ge eae RR 143 Bulb Replacement 205 445 Cleaning 12 3 ere fere RAS A pa es 434 Delay ike re e pa Lx ue 143 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 147 Lights On Reminder 145 On With Wipers 408 INDEX MMM PASSING sex e aed er aea Ee 147 uid CR 142 Time Delay 3 adi Rr Rx Es 143 Heated Mirrors scs dices m dasi EERE ra 93 Heated Seats c secix Howat et eee EVE E 133 Llealer ae eis Gar a area tikta Vane e der Vu boas 252 Heater Engine Block i 222 9e 274 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 147 Hill Start Assist v2 6 cese nee hm 303 Hitches Trailer Towing serer Lenta aR EAE 354 Holder Cup cock da intrau yiee 180 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 164 Hood Release rraio as egi a e dese Rs 141 TENIHO aes sese wwe a 14 Key eua mapa RT Xa ebat 12 14 Ignition Key Removal ssss 14 Illuminated Entty 4 essa deer Ey rns 21 Immobilizer Sentry Key sess 16 Infant Restraint askea a iranek 70 71 Information Center Vehicle 05 200 Instrument Cluster lees 190 Instrument Panel and Controls 188 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 435 Integrated Power Module Fuses 436 Interior Appearance Care 004 434
367. s Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays E 072710829 L Integrated Power Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 CAUTION Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse e When installing the integrated power module 1 m 15 Amp Washer Motor cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Blue erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so 2 25 Amp Powertrain Control may allow water to get into the integrated power Natural Module PCM module and possibly result in an electrical system 3 E 25 Amp Ignition Run Start failure Natural When replacing a blown fuse it is important to 4 25Amp EGRSolenid use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Natural Alternator The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated 5 L 15 Amp Powertrain Control may result in a dangerous electrical system over Blue Module load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it 6 EX 25 Amp Ignition Coley indicates a problem in the circuit that must be T o cote sted 7 25 Amp Headlamp Washer Natural Relay If Equipped 8 30 Amp Starter Green 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
368. s On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch Fog Light Operation An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column SU S 2On ne p 031663008 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the leve
369. s after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button If the START STOP button is not present insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Insert Key Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob Once inserted the message Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON RUN e For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Push Button Insert Key will display in the EVIC until you push the START button Cancel Remote Start Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm e Any engine warning lights come on e Low Fuel Light turns on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The shift lever is moved out of PARK ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
370. s can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 6L Automatic 12 sq ft 1 11 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 5 7L Automatic 12 sq ft 1 11 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch
371. s can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix te Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost GH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 e Air Conditioner Control NOTE Press this button to turn on the air e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK conditioning during manual operation position the recirculation feature will be cancelled only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn
372. s can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window defroster only when the engine is operating window NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instrument Panel Features 188 Mi Instrument Cluster 0 0008 189 Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 190 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 200 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays i e dm RE ER xe Rei aues 203 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 204 Trip FUNCHONS 525259 xg asses ea eh 205 Sport Mode ede eee Sa Re 208 Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped eresi osse Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped 6c a Bea shee eae s 209 Compass Display 005 210 System Warnings Customer Information Features 212 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 212 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INS
373. s long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate E STARTING AND OPERATING 351 NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs TRAILER TOWING Manual Transmission If Equipped Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to t
374. s required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WA
375. ser may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the VR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the amp button to be
376. service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm
377. speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and mm type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotat
378. ss the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setti
379. ssembly 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME 10 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 12 Reinstall the tail lamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner 13 Reinstall tail lamp retainer 14 Close the trunk Center Tail Backup Lamp See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 6 Liter Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 57 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 11 1 Quarts 10 5 Liters Formula or equivalent
380. ssibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle
381. stalling The Button 050105203 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Removing The Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF position Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again Using The ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the
382. t Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is access the jack on a jack The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire 6 1 Open the trunk Continued 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap i Opening The Access Panel 4 Remove the spare tire 3 Re
383. t for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mMm example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the Se button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned t
384. t system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 056807146 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Use a finger to pull open the door If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap Base Model ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Cap R T Model NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is r
385. tate the tires rotate at the first sign of JJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the N irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 3 72 000 miles 117 000 km 1 Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints J Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km whichever S T Inspect exhaust system comes first C Inspect the rear axle fluid J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary H Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary E Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Mon
386. tem Security Alarm 18 Tilt Steering Columti 5 osito n 151 Time Delay Headlight s 143 Tire and Loading Information Placard 315 Tire Identification Number TIN 313 Tire Markings 2 2 9 ye ee aaa 309 Tire Safety Information 040 309 WIREBID s2d een 0 ret iie sera deaed ees os 368 l x 2 bag eso kas M HSE Pare PS 84 319 477 Aging Life of Tires 00 0 326 Air Pressure i222 3 Rx ER RE ES 319 CHAINS 2 a6 144 Sache aa a DRE VERE RP 328 Changing 4 2 e eee s 379 382 Compact Spare sev eg ate hes eas 323 Plat Changing 3 ey ek x redo sr ien 379 General Information 00 319 To Open Hood High Speed samas nit ie ete ree Re 322 Inflation Pressures 00004 320 Jacking 22222949 RIRERR OE DERI 381 382 Liet Tires 2 9 Ae ERES SEES 326 Load Capacity xoa Gee ees 315 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 331 Pressure Warning Light 197 Quality Grading 005 477 Radial si 09 2 animera here nea aie as 322 Replacement es yea tke Mesas 327 Rotation i scu es eee es oe PEU 330 Safety ios y eee ea eee PER 309 319 SIZES aii a Daa save avd ws See Pte a aes 311 Snow Ties 3 56 4 e ae srine iois 329 Spare Vite 2 4 dct odes edo dane HORE 379 SPINNING ssr cess e o ka e 325 Trailer IOWIDE i rs em huc Rn 358 Tread Wear Indicators 326 498 INDEX EE Tongue Weight Trailer
387. tem in this position before proceeding plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or induce vomiting Consult a physician in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the ignition immediately TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of 4 Set the parking brake 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Sealant Mode position 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose 3 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Se
388. that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 455 scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to
389. the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 16 000 miles 26 000 km 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months M Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary ood Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 457 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Q Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the Rotate the tires rot
390. ths Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving J Inspect the rear axle fluid 0 CO O O C O C O C O O L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil a
391. tion placard Continued 358 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING Continued Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 2 GIW Information in Starting and Operating for the 3 GAWR proper inspection procedure 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact 19 Wing Requirements Trailer Brakes spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 WARNING An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is re
392. tomatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 2 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON RUN and then back to OFF four times ending up in the LOCK position However do not start the engine 4 Within 30 seconds press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Usethe Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicles Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to
393. ton on the RKE transmit ter to lock both doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry feature This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to soun
394. traint that is correct for your child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or deat
395. trol knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Pre
396. ts e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IV The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pres sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing mi 819793fc STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
397. ttery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION e Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur Automatic Transmission The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause Manual Transmission The manufacturer reco
398. tting to factory settings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period EI Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O
399. ty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 a NJ 5 XX D ee 7 42 eu WATER IW FURL REAR NDOW WNDSHELD WIPER EXTERION UL HIGH BEAM Tug siias tin WFER VTERMITTENT FAILURE amp OOGSs sx 020 n S eS Lr xD dex e E 8 AWD 3 namime MARSON CONDI HUE Fae OS GUT Oan Cae STE ETE MEL EE Os Mute mh ae Ge a X V awi owe ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW Gaam KEAR FOG LAMP PTR
400. ular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com mercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abra sive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry 7 with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning The Center Console Cupholder
401. uld also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Power Sunroof Switch 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Mode Press the switch rearward and release it and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Closing Sunroof Express Mode Press the switch forward and release it and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract
402. unning A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicat
403. uous Chime Second Tone Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When ParkSense is disabled the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARK ASSIST CLEAN SENSOR PARK ASSIST SER VICE message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST CLEAN SENSOR or the PARK ASSIST SER VICE message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If PARK ASSIST CLEAN SENSOR
404. val begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in the RUN position again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN position the headlights are off and the parking brake is released The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving If vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights the front turn signal lamps provide the Daytime Running Lamp DRL function If equipped the DRL will flash when a turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when the turn signal is no longer flashing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service Light
405. vals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick By using the AutoStick mode and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Manual Transmission Automatic Ground Transmission Flat Tow None e Transmission in NEUT
406. ve Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Enable Disable the Rear Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lo
407. ver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Electron
408. ward Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward are also equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat move in the direction of the switch Release the switch Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support when the desired position has been reached 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup port Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Power Lumbar Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstructi
409. wer knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Sct mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Sct mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or A C on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Sel temperature knobs for comfort to any speed 1o any air delivery point outside or recirculated AIC on or off 045609172 255 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel 7 Airis directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlet
410. wer right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Gir iL War idm imt 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search f
411. will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily fe
412. with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the v
413. xception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radi
414. y Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages
415. y changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III
416. y shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached The trans mission will upshift only when commanded by the driver The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows down to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right or press and hold the shift paddle if equipped until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision o
417. y the following commands e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Frequency to change the frequency 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Satellite Radio Disc To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you Radio In this mode you may say the following com may say the following commands aman e Track to change the track oe eee AM LI d Ed e Next Track to play the next track spoken number pay e Next Channel to select the next channel Previaus Trak io pIay the previous wack e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Previous Channel to select the previous channel HY s Memo e List Channel to hear a list of available channels To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In e Select Name to say the name of a channel this mode you may say the following commands e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command 4vr button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Save to save the memo ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Continue to continue recording e Switch to system setup Delete to delete the recording e Change to setup Play Memos to play previously
418. you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode 3o Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Messages Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing English Uconnect Calls all Dial Redial Assistance Emergency Espanol Phonebook Setup OTU BHSIEY SMS Francais Last See Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages x Flowchart is redialed Number associated Number is Dialed with entry is dialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Phonebook Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Entries Listed one Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Enter Locat
419. ystem and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Co

2012 Dodge Challenger Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents